Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally. 1 .

2 .

electrical. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. such as mechanical equipment. such as duct. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and piping. fixtures. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. and plumbing engineering workflows. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and plumbing fixtures.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Germany. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. 3 . including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. Add more detailed modelling elements. electrical panels.

When you install the training files as instructed. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. For example. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. when you add ductwork. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. and sheets to document the project. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Metric: files for users working with metric units. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. You do not design entire systems. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. is located and accessed in the training files location. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. NOTE Depending on your installation. you can choose to save your work. views. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. your Training folder may be in a different location. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. however. annotations. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. When you open a training file. and tags. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. However. as well as how to open and save them. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. After completing each exercise. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an _i suffix.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. On the Contents tab. In this exercise. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. such as templates and families. For example. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Create detail views. templates. So. Create schedules. you learn where the training files are located. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. to provide a richer and more finished design. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. a list of file types displays. You may close the file with or without saving changes.rvt) is selected. 3 In the right pane. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. For File name. verify that Project Files (*. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. if you open settings. you are prompted to save the changes. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. and click Open. the Open dialog displays. For Files of type. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Accessing Training Files | 5 . 8 If you have made changes. For example. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click Save. enter the new file name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. scroll down.rvt and make changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. click ➤ Save As. double-click Imperial or Metric. and click the Training Files icon.rvt. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 4 Click the training file name. and you can open any supported file type. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close.

6 .

You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. scope. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. 2D and 3D view. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. schedules. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and schedules required for a building project. every drawing sheet. the operation of the software is parametric. quantities. You learn the terminology. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and phases when you need it. drawing sheets. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. hence. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. drawings. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In this case. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. If the length of the elevation is changed. In this case. In the Revit MEP model. sections. the hierarchy of elements. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. ■ ■ 7 . This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the parameter is one of association or connection. and plans. the floor or roof remains connected.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson.

and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and electrical panels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. levels. grids. sprinklers. boilers. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and 2D detail components. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. tags. and reference planes are datum elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Datum elements help to define project context. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. sinks. dimensions. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. sinks. sprinklers. For example. Examples include detail lines. ducts. filled regions. tags. They display in relevant views of the design. They help to describe or document the design. boilers. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. and electrical panels. dimensions. When you change something. and keynotes are annotation elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ducts. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. walls and ceilings are hosts. For example. For example. For example. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Most often. The project file contains all information for the building design. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. schedules. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. This information includes components used to design the model. from geometry to construction data. floors. such as roofs. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. and drawings of the design. or bottom of foundation. top of wall. families. and types. Often. North . Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. In other cases. Project: In Revit MEP. you must be in a section or elevation view. you can explicitly control them. If you can draw. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . elevation views. By using a single project file. programming is not required. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. To place levels. However.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. For example. In Revit MEP. views of the project. section views. for example. and ceilings. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. you do nothing to establish these relationships. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. and so forth). Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. first floor.

However. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). System families include ducts. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. such as a A0 title block. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. For example. A type can also be a style. A type can be a specific size of a family. Type: Each family can have several types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. pipes. or layer the views to see only the one on top.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. and similar graphical representation. identical use. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. System families can be transferred between projects. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Unlike system and standard component families. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can also display several project views at one time. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. each in-place family contains only a single type. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Then experiment with them. showing. hiding. With a few clicks. and wires. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface.

or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. To return the panel to the ribbon. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.

tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. When working on the Modify tab. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for editing existing elements. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. architect-specific tools. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and CAD files. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. data and systems. project and system parameters. and for switching views. then select what you want to modify. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools used for running analysis on the current design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. select the tool first.. and settings. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.

displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. provides requested information. To keep a panel expanded. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. closes the application menu (double-click). application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). displays frequently used tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. For example.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. when adding duct. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides access to common tools. By default.

(Export) On the application menu. select a file to open. select a template and create a new drawing.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. (Open) save the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as Export and Publish. (Save As) export the current drawing.. click.

publish the current project. (Print) access product and license information. or template file. and Walkthrough. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Licensing) close the file. annotation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. but is not enabled by default.On the application menu. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.. to. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. annotation. saves a current project. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. or template file.. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. provides views including Default 3D.. To enable or disable a tool item. click.. family. family. Camera. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.

items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. or the Family Editor. This displays the command history in a list. To hide the Status Bar. displaying the same information.To undo or redo a series of operations. Clipboard. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. In addition. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. However. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. check the Status Bar. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. When you are using a command. repeat the command. when you switch to another editing mode. Modify. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. To show the Status Bar again. When you are highlighting an element or component. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Group. Clear the Status Bar check mark. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. workshared components. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Starting with the most recent command.

for example. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. click (Modify). To change existing elements to a different type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . When you place an element in a drawing.To cancel or exit the current command. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Place a Wall. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. 1 Click ➤ Open. There are several ways to access zoom options. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. After you are familiar with these tasks.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. For example. Zoom the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. In the following steps. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.rvt. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms in on the selected area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. In the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 Click in the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. this is referred to as a crossing selection. If you do not have a wheel mouse. on the Navigation bar. 9 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. To modify or add snap increments. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. click . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Modifying the View | 19 . the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design.

13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 14 To exit the wheel. and then using the Zoom tool again. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. Click and drag to orbit the design. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and click tin the Options dialog. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. For more information about SteeringWheels. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. moving the wheel to the desired location. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. As you move the mouse. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. click the SteeringWheels tab. press ESC. ➤ Options. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.

and open Level 2 . After you are familiar with these tasks. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. These are the drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Similar controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. 2 Enter ZR. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.Design. and select the duct.HVAC Plan . as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. called drag controls. Small blue dots. referred to as shape handles. bottoms.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. display along the ends. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.

4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. In this example. 6 On the Undo menu. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move. or press CTRL+Z. click the Undo command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. on the Standard toolbar. select the first item in the list. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

require 2 clicks to complete the command. 10 Move the cursor to the right. such as Move and Copy. After selecting the element to move.Some commands. and drag it to the left as shown. as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. for example. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 11 With the duct already selected. In this case. and click again to specify the ending position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . click to specify the starting position.

Return. Press ESC twice.Supply. 14 Enter VG. 13 To end a command. For example. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click OK. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. such as the Modify Ducts command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.End a command Some commands. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as the default project units and settings. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. system families. settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. 6 Click OK. New projects inherit all the families. In that case. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). such as coordination review and interference checking. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and modify system settings. 27 . use copy/monitor. You can choose from several templates. create and manage views. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. and open North. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. and click Open. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and loadable families. such as ducts and pipes. select Project.rte template. under Template file. the default building levels and standard views. click Browse. link files. You can either select a template from the template library. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. and open Metric ➤ Templates. 5 In the New Project dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. Finally. under Create new. 7 In the Project Browser. click Training files. and geometry from the starting template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it.

18 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Location. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. In the Choose Template dialog. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select Manchester. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click Edit. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. navigate to Metric Templates. click Browse. for Energy Data. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .8 In the drawing area. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. For example. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. ■ ■ Under Create new. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. (Browse). 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Click Cancel. for City. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. NH. select School or University. select Level 1. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. select Project template. click (Browse). Click OK. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. you can select it now.rte template and click Open. When you select the material. create another new project using the Construction template. Click OK twice. 10 Using the same method. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. ■ For Building Construction. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. review the construction materials listed. under Energy Analysis.

For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings.00 mm. select Views. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 25 In the left pane. click Round. 33 Click OK. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. For Categories. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 110. 24 In the right pane. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 290.00 mm.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. for 90. 23 In the left pane. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. click Rectangular. and 140.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings.00 mm. click Wiring. power distribution systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. piping.000 mm. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. Holding CTRL.00 mm. 26 In the right pane. 140.00 mm. for 20. and 310. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Click OK twice. wiring. and demand factors for electrical systems.00 mm.rfa and click Open. under Pipe Settings. 260. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. for 90. and fire protection systems. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 22 In the right pane. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. plumbing. click Sizes. 27 Click OK.00 mm.00 mm. 110. select Identity Data.

An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. For Sort by. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. click Browse. Notice that the file is saved as a template.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. For Then by. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 Click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select Project. Click Open. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 38 Close the file. To enable this coordination. Linking Projects In this exercise. select View Name.rvt. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. click Training. families. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Family and Type. and groups that are contained in a project. In addition. select Auto . 2 In the New Project dialog. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select Type/Discipline and click Edit.Origin to Origin. select Sub-Discipline. under Create new. You need to create the MEP model for the project. under Template file. select Associated Level. For Then by. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. From the Positioning list. sheets. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project.

13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. select the linked architectural model. select Room Bounding. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 12 Click OK. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Constraints. Linking Projects | 31 . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 If necessary.Mech.

17 On the Options Bar. click the level line for 03. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.Floor. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. click Plan View types. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 On the left side of the view. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 In the Plan View Types dialog.

35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. level 3. warnings notify you of any violations. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. click By Host View. If you modify a monitored element. highlight the linked model. and the level 4.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. indicating that a relationship is established. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. and that the copied elements are monitored. indicating that an element has changed. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. a warning message displays. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. appears above the copied elements. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. 27 In the drawing area. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and click to select the linked model. click Custom. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 34 On the Basics tab. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. After copying. select Custom. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. 29 In the drawing area. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. Linking Projects | 33 . for the link file. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated.

for Name. Site. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. Under Visibility. and Topography.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. enter Mechanical View and click OK. 7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 36 Click OK. Planting. Click OK. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 5 On the Basics tab. 3 In the View templates dialog. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Select Show categories from all disciplines. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Roads. Click OK. under View Properties. select Custom. for the link file. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. click Custom. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Under Visibility. click Edit. click Custom. deselect Levels. deselect Parking.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. Modifying System Settings | 35 . under View Templates. select Mechanical and click OK.rte. click Training Files. Notice that the drawing area is black. they are not saved to project files or template files. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 5 In the New Project dialog. 3 Under Colors. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 7 Click OK. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. These settings control the graphics. 8 Click ➤ Options. and your username when using worksharing. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. and click OK. click the Graphics tab. click Browse. select Invert background color.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. notification preferences. journal cleanup options. 2 In the Options dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click the Graphics tab. 9 In the Options dialog. selection default options. under Template file. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment.

and family libraries. you specify default file locations. select None. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 12 Click the General tab. 21 Close the file without saving it. 11 In the Color dialog. For Tooltip assistance. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. However. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 13 Under Notifications. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. including your default project template. click the value for Selection color. When an error occurs. 14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the elements causing the error display using this color. select One hour. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 19 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. family template files. click the File Locations tab. 2 In the Options dialog. select yellow. 18 Select the wall. and click OK. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.10 Under Colors. 17 Press ESC to end the command. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element.

centralized. you can start a new project with that template. 8 Click Cancel. In the following illustration. Load. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. click Browse. Save. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. click Browse. 7 In the Options dialog. and Import dialogs. This path is set automatically during the installation process. ➤ New ➤ Project. 10 In the Places dialog. note the list of library names. select the folder to save your files to by default. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Specifying File Locations | 37 . Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. However. TIP To view a template. 5 Under Default path for user files. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. under Default path for family template files. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. saving. 4 Click Cancel. Click and click Browse to select a template. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and click Open. When you are opening. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. or loading a Revit MEP file. and you can create new libraries. click Places. click Browse. You can modify the existing library names and path. such as in a large. These are the family templates that you use to create new families.3 Under Default template file.

➤ Open. 15 Under Library Name. templates. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click (Browse). and click Open. click (Add Value). 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog.11 In the Places dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. Load. click the My Library icon. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Save. and Import dialogs. and select it as the library path. click My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and click OK twice. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. or families. and change the name to My Library.

13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. If you work in a large office. 5 In the text editor. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Edit. view the current path. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 11 In the Options dialog. 22 Select My Library. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 2 In the Options dialog. 20 Click ➤ Options. 21 On the File Locations tab. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. specify the new location here. custom color files. click Places. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click the Spelling tab. 3 Under Settings. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 14 Click in the drawing area. such as bump maps. 27 Click OK. and decal image files. 9 In the text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click OK. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. This path is determined during installation. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 19 Click Cancel. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. select Ignore words in uppercase. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 8 Under Building industry dictionary.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. If you want to relocate this path. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.

3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click the Spelling tab. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Browse. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 22 In the text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off. 23 In the text editor.rte. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Restore Defaults. 18 Click ➤ Options. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.17 In the Spelling dialog. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click OK. click File menu ➤ Save. under Dimension Snaps. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 20 Under Settings. As you zoom in and out within a view. 21 Under Personal dictionary. you modify snap increments. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 24 In the Options dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. and enter 500 . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap settings. click Edit. under Template file. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 19 In the Options dialog. work with snapping turned off. delete sheetmtl-CU. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Training Files. click Close.

For example. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. snapping reverts to the system default settings. enter SM. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 8 In the Snaps dialog. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. zoom out until it does so. If you do not have a wheel button. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. TIP To zoom while sketching. and move the cursor to the right. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. deselect Chain. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. use the wheel button on your mouse. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. such as ZO to zoom out.7 Under Object Snaps. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. click OK. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. While sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. If it does not.

This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 19 Enter SM. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and delete the value 500 . 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 22 Move the cursor downward. and the wall edges. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 26 Close the file. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. with or without saving it. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and specify the wall endpoint.. If you move the cursor along the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and move the cursor to the right. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 25 Click OK. the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 24 Under Dimension Snaps.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .

44 .

you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. water source heat pump (WSHP). This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you first plan the system. you can choose to save your work. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. In this exercise.autodesk. At the end of the tutorial. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. However. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. If the tutorial training files are not present. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In this lesson. As you create the mechanical system. you will understand the process. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. After finishing each exercise. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. This system consists of a cooling tower. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you design a mechanical system for an office building. and then you create a plenum level. go to http://www.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. methodology. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you first configure the linked architectural model. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. By following the recommended workflow. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 45 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m.rvt. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. click Training Files. and click OK. roof.Space Plan is highlighted. under Constraints. Next. not in the MEP training file. you add a level for plenums. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). In this section. select Room Bounding. NOTE When working with a linked file. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 1 In the Project Browser. These components are defined in the architectural training file. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. ceilings. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This makes the architectural components (such as walls. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click to select it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and after the linked model highlights.MEP. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. indicating that it’s the active view. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 In the Project Browser. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and double-click West .

click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. The new level is placed. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. 9 On the Draw panel. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and click OK. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. enter 2600mm. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and click Properties. Preparing Spaces | 47 . Click Plan View Types. and in the Plan View Types dialog. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 16 Press Esc. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views.

it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. select Plenum Plan. for Top. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. NOTE After finishing each exercise. ■ Click OK twice. Under View Depth. enter an Offset of 300mm. you can choose to save your work. for View Range. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. Under Identity Data. click Edit. for Level.Plenum. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Level Above (Level 3). In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. For Cut plane. and for Offset. select MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. for View Scale. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . 20 In the Project Browser. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Sub-Discipline. In this exercise. for Default View Template. Under Extents. For View Classification. In this exercise. However. select Design. In the next exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you place spaces in areas of the building model. enter 0. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces.

indicating that it’s the active view. For Offset. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select New.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. walls. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 2 Plenum. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For (Tag Location). click Training Files. For Space. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. and ceilings).rvt. select Horizontal. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. Placing Spaces | 49 . For Upper Limit.Space Plan is highlighted. enter 0. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.

8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK. ensuring coordination between the files. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.7 Click to place the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. enter 219.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 9 Select the space. for Number. For Name. 14 In the drawing area. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).

demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 21 Using the method learned previously. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. enter 0. For Upper Limit. select Level 3. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and then click Modify. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Spaces | 51 . change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Offset.

23 Click OK. you place a space in a large corridor area. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . click Training Files. and then press Esc. enter 0. and for Offset.rvt. for Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and select Corridor. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 10 Click in the number column. and change the space number to 216A. click in the name column. which was numbered 219Q. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. In the schedule. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and scroll to the newly placed space.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 15 Press Esc twice. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 11 Close the schedule view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. as shown.

16 Using the method learned previously. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space. you place a space in a chase. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.

Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .rvt. If necessary. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Space Plan is highlighted.

but that the space does not fill the entire chase.4 Press Esc. expand Spaces. select Roof Level. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click in the section view. for Upper Limit. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. right-click. 10 In the plan view. select the space. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. For Offset. In the plan view. 6 Enter VG. click in the chase area to place the space. On the Options Bar. enter 0. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. select Interior and Reference. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click OK. and click Element Properties. for Upper Limit. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select Level 3. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

for Name. and maximize the view. All spaces in the view are tagged. enter 1200. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. enter Chase. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Bounding elements (such as walls. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter 225PC. ceilings. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . and click OK. 17 Type ZF. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Under Identity Data. For Number. under Loaded Tags.■ For Limit Offset.Space Plan. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. floors. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 15 Press Esc.

The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. it is automatically added to the Default zone. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. indicating that it’s the active view. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. In the next exercises. which removes the space from the Default zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. After a space is placed in an area. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. click Training Files. In this exercise. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Reference. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. To display space reference lines. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. under Spaces. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.20 Close the file with or without saving it. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click View ➤ Zones. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

The Zone tool is active. To display space reference lines. you assign spaces to zones in the building. click Reference. The new zone is listed in the System Browser.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). ) or 5 In the System Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.rvt. select Occupiable. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. indicating that the space is occupiable. indicating that it’s the active view. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Energy Analysis. under Spaces. As you do this. Next. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. you assign spaces to a zone. click Training Files.Zoning is highlighted. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . the Edit Zone tab displays. and a new zone is created. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m.

You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and click Finish Editing Zone. Expand HVAC Zones. and modify the zone properties. Using the Edit Zone tab. Click OK. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Instruction. Instruction 221. 5 With the drawing area active. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). you need to activate the zone visibility. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 4 In the drawing area. select Computer Lab 222. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the System Browser. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. type VG. select HVAC Zones. and Electrical 220 spaces. To view the zone in the drawing area.

you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Area B. and click OK.West . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and verify the zone in the System Browser.rvt. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. In this exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .TIP After you finish editing the zone.West . enter 2 . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning view to activate it. click Finish Editing Zone. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. for Name. under Identity Data. click Training Files. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. under Spaces. indicating that it’s the active view.Zoning. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 9 In the System Browser. 11 Close the System Browser. 5 Click in the Level 1 . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. You activated zone visibility in the views. expand 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. click Reference.

13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning view. zoom out. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 8 In the Level 1 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Select Attached End. click in the Level 2 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning floor plan. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 15 Press Esc.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning view. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.Zoning to make it the active view. space. and select 109 Lounge. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1 . Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. enter Lounge . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. you verify the building. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Front. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. verify that Wireframe is selected. double-click the zone tag. and zone information. click Training Files. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. for Name Value. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.rvt. on the ViewCube. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. click the corner where the Top. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.East. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.

Next. click (Isolate).The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . All spaces in the zone display in isolation. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ Click (Highlight). select 1_South_Area C. you isolate the space. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. With 109 Lounge selected. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Using the Highlight tool. ■ ■ On the Details tab. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.

the zone information displays for the selected zone. For People. For Construction Type. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. select 109 Lounge. and click OK. and then click OK. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . For Heating Information. cooling air temperature. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and humidification set point.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. heating air temperature. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). This indicates the cooling set point. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and air changes per hour.11 °C : 32. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. ■ ■ ■ Next. Next. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. This indicates the outdoor air per person. verify that <Building> is selected.22 °C : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. Next. Below the list of spaces and zones. click (Shading). Below the list of spaces and zones. click .22 °C : N/A is specified. For Cooling Information. This indicates the heating set point. verify that 23. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. scroll down in the left pane. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. the space information displays for the selected space. outdoor air per area. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone.33 °C : 12. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and dehumidification set point. For Electrical Loads. and then click OK. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select Lounge/Recreation. click . and in the People dialog. verify that 21. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. click .

68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . floors. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. open MEP . 15 In the Project Browser. enter 0. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. and other room-bounding components. For Offset. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. roofs. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. select Level 3. click Cancel. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space.

for Number. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. space. you verified building. Under Energy Analysis. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and verify that the space has replaced the void. For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Plenum. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. enter 212P. Under Energy Analysis. Click OK. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Because this is an unoccupied space. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and zone information. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. In this exercise. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and select space Plenum 212P. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). select Plenum.

For Export Complexity. for Building Service. click Training Files. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). for City. and click OK. For Sliver Space Tolerance. If. is selected. On the Place tab. enter 03101. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. and click OK. select School or University. under Volume Computations. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that <Building> is specified. On the Weather tab. Click OK twice. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. click Edit. select space Library 219. and click Element Properties. this option adjusts the times automatically. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that New Construction is selected. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. For Location. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Manchester. 8 In the drawing area. For Building Construction. right-click.rvt. you need to select this option. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. click in the Value field. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. NH. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. under Energy Analysis. double-click Level 2 .Space Plan.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that Level 1 is selected. For Postal Code. verify that 300 is specified. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. for Energy Data. For Project Phase. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In order to select a space. For Ground Plane. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.

■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Building Service. For Space Type. and click to learn the cause for the warning. select Actual. for Values. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . verify that Occupiable is selected. For Location.Audio Visual. You have verified the building information. a cooling load. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. Select the space associated with the warning. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). is specified. select Heated and cooled. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. and enter 15 sq. m. click in the Value column. and then click . 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Edit. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that <Building> is specified. click Edit. 12 Click the Details tab. for Values. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. Select Area per person. for Values. select Specified. Next.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For Sensible. Click OK twice. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. For Latent. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Under Power. For Building Construction. select Actual. For Condition Type. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. NH. for Values. Under Heat Gain (per Person). or neither. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 60 W. Click OK. select Library . For People. verify that School or University is selected. and click OK. select Specified. enter 45 W. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. verify that Manchester. both.

19 In the drawing area. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. You should correct the space error in the building model. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. There should be no warnings displayed. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. 21 Click OK. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. click Information). NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 17 In the loads report. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. space. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and under Heating Information. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. and click OK. select 219 Library. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. In this exercise. and can be modified here. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. space. select 219 Library. or make any changes to the model.11°C. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 15 Review the loads report for project.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. 16 After you review the loads report. under Energy Analysis. click Calculate.Space Plan. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. weather. or zone information. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. and a loads report displays. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and zone information for the building model.

rvt. click Training Files. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select HVAC Zones. click to the right of the building to place the legend.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. in relatively small increments. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the drawing area. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. 5 Zoom in to the legend. indicating that it’s the active view. For Color Scheme. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Click OK. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts.

7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Cooling Load . and click OK.Expanded Ranges. The new scheme displays in the view. under Schemes. select the color scheme legend. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. click Training Files. 11 Using the method learned previously. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. In the next exercise. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.rvt. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.

select Calculated Supply Airflow. and click OK. select HVAC. select Spaces.Space Fill is the active view. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Select Formula.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. enter Space Airflow Schedule. click (Browse). double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Type. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Airflow Delta. ■ Click Calculated Value. For Discipline. enter .Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. for Select available fields from. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Formula. for Formula. select New Construction. select Air Flow. For Phase. In the Calculated Value dialog. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Select Schedule building components. Click OK. and then click . Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Name. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Spaces. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Available fields. In the Fields dialog. more category options are available.

Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. select Airflow Delta. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. Header. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. select red. select Level. right-click to access schedule properties. For Then by. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. click the color swatch. and then select Hidden field. and Blank line. Under Conditions to Use. ■ The schedule displays. select Level. select Number. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. select Not Between. Click OK twice. and click OK. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. and then click Conditional Format. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . a view opens that contains the selected space. verify that Show is highlighted. For Value. For Background Color. In the Color dialog. Select Ascending. For Fields.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.

all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In later exercises. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the next lesson. In this exercise. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. and work with the airflow schedule. After system creation. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. 79 . you will create supply air systems. After completing the air systems lesson. Then. In this lesson.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). As you place the air terminals. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you modify air terminal parameters.

rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. click Training Files. and scroll to space 223.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. the space crossing lines display.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the ceiling view. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

verify that Constrain is cleared. and press Enter. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. The schedule updates with the new flow data. click Place on Face. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and then press Esc to end the command. which in this case is the ceiling grid.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. enter 215 L/s. Also. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 9 On the Placement panel. and select M_Supply Diffuser . for Flow. and then select both Copy and Multiple. the hosted elements are updated as well. select the diffuser. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. type 3600. If the host element is modified or moved. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 17 Move the cursor down. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and press Enter. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .

click Yes. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. and click Open.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 29 Place 2 diffusers. select one of the diffusers. and then press Esc. as shown. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 22 In the drawing area. 25 In the drawing area. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. 28 On the Placement tab. 21 On the Options Bar. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. clear Leader. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.rfa. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. As you place the return diffusers. click Place on Face. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Next.

click Yes. select Strong Reference. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 31 In the alert dialog. as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . Level. 32 In the Project Browser. and click to select the lines. under Other. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click OK. select one of the return diffusers. for Reference. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref.

and then select the top edge of the diffuser. as shown. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select the vertical grid line as shown. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and then press Esc twice. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. align the other return diffuser.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 40 In the drawing area. 43 Using the same method. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown.

44 While pressing Ctrl. for Flow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. right-click. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. and click OK. and press Enter. under Mechanical. 47 Using the same method. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. clear LeftArrow. and on the Options Bar. As you place the air terminals. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and click Element Properties. enter 310 L/s. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. select both return diffusers. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 In the Type Selector. at the lower left corner of the building.HVAC Plan .Design to make it the active view. and double-click Level 1 .200 Neck. click 1 : 100. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. for Scale. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 2 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 10 In the drawing area. the space crossing lines display. expand HVAC . and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. select M_Supply Diffuser .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.

■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. As a result.Airflow. move the cursor down. and then press Enter. Under Mechanical . under Constraints. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. enter 170 L/s. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. Also. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. for Flow. Click OK. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. 11 Select the diffuser. for Offset.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . type 6000. enter 2400. 15 Press Esc. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. By copying the diffuser. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

and then press Esc. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 18 On the Options Bar. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.16 Using the same method. clear Leader. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers.

29 Using the same method. for Embedded Schedule. for Flow. tile the windows. under space 115. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click OK 3 times. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. 26 Using the method learned previously. select 21. select Mark. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. and press Enter. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. Type. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. double-click System Type. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. mark. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. and click View Properties. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. For Category. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. under Available Fields. enter 210 L/s.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. and Flow. Mark. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. for Sort by. under Other. type. click Edit. Next. and then right-click in the schedule. select Air Terminals. 27 In the schedule. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. it is a negative value. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s.

pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. as shown. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. 31 In the drawing area. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone. and maximize Level 1 . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Plan .Design.

38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 33 Click OK.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.3 times the heating load). verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.43 W (approximately 1.7-18 kW .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.Horizontal . 36 In the drawing area. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . and under Energy Analysis. 35 In the Type Selector. select M_WSHP .High Efficiency . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.

4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.rvt.HVAC Plan . 6 Keep the System Browser open. including energy analysis. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. However. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click the title. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. In this exercise. When you highlight a space. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. and click OK. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. As you add diffusers to systems. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. indicating that it’s the active view. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. for Constraints ➤ Offset. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.Design is highlighted. enter . 44 Zoom in to space 115. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. After creating the logical connection. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and click View ➤ Systems. click Training Files. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.

8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 12 In the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). and the system connects them. 18 Click OK. On the Options Bar. Connect Into. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. the air terminals are the children. System Name. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. and Flow value. 11 In the drawing area.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 17 Using the method learned previously. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 15 Click Cancel. review the Number of Elements. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the number of elements is updated.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. for System Name. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Identity Data. In this exercise. for Mark. click Training Files. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. under Mechanical. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create ductwork to physically connect system components.Rename the system Next. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 22 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 25 Click OK. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection.rvt. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.

Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Design is highlighted. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select the upper left diffuser. 7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. select Network. For Offset. 4 In the drawing area. enter 3000. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 5 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan. For Flex Duct Type. enter 3000. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. the space crossing lines display. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Also. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . In this case. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Select Branch. click Settings. for Solution Type. For Offset. A Generate Layout tab displays. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. indicating that it’s the active view. which provides various layout tools. For Duct Type. the Network type provides several solutions. and display solution 1.Round.

■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. click Modify. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . or manually modify the duct. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. enter 900. select a different layout solution. 11 Click Finish Layout. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. or offset elevations are incorrect. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. as shown. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you’ll get an error in a later step. Click OK. For example. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. as is the elbow itself. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. 9 On the Generate Layout panel.

press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Using a flow-based color scheme. a disconnection exists. The first time you press Tab. select Duct Color Fill . you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.Flow. and click to select it. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and equipment. fittings. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Usually. highlight a segment of the main duct. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. thus it is not part of the system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. If the entire network does not highlight. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click OK. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . for Color Scheme. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area.

and on the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers in the system. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select the WSHP. and click OK. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. for Values Displayed.Airflow. under Graphics. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select By View. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and press Enter. but not all values are used in this view. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. under Mechanical . 20 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and then click OK.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme.

and then press Esc to clear the selection. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and enter . for Schemes. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Under Constraints. and then click to select it.Velocity. highlight a segment of the duct. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. for Branch Sizing. Select Only.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. select Calculated Size Only. 26 Click OK. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Cancel. Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Select Restrict Height. select the color scheme legend.65 Pa/m. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select the upper segment of main duct. select Friction. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and drag it to the right. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and select 400.

32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Using this tool. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and pressure loss. pressure. static pressure. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.The ductwork and fittings are updated. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Use the information that displays (flow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork.

Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. also known as the critical path. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 35 Click Finish. click Training Files. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.rvt.NOTE As you inspect a system. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.

2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design is highlighted. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Draw Duct. and select the WSHP. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.

Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Front. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 11 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 15 On the ViewCube. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. and click Draw Duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. click the corner where the Top. double-click MEP . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click the connector grip.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.3D MEP. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. enter 3000. NOTE When drawing duct. 14 In the Project Browser. for Offset. select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.

in space 115. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). The ductwork is automatically created.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.

and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 Select the remaining diffusers.22 Using the same method. 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.

Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 30 Press Esc twice. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and then click Modify. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.

40 Using the same method. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click to select it. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.Airflow. and click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Constraints. under Mechanical . select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. clear Restrict Height. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . for Flow.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. such as a plenum. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.

108 .

Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. including 2 base mounted pumps. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. 109 . and a cooling tower located on the roof. Create return and supply piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping. on level 3 of the building model. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you place mechanical equipment. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. In this lesson. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Then.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. in corridor 328. as shown.HVAC Plan .Left Return . click Training Files. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Horizontal High Efficiency .7-18kW . indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Design is highlighted.rvt. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select M_WSHP .

8 Click the corridor wall face. and click to place the dimension.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . click the dimension. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. verify that Wall faces is selected. and enter 600. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 10 Select the WSHP.

112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .11 Press Enter and then press Esc. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.) 14 Click Modify. as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and in the Type Selector. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. select the 2 WSHPs. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Under Mechanical.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 0. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Click OK. 21 Click Modify. for Water Flow.75 L/s. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 2750. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and click to place it in the mechanical room. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.

22 Close the file with or without saving it. You can create pipes to connect system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Unlike logical connections (systems). but without a corresponding system. including flow and pressure. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. analyses cannot be performed. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create the logical connection between the system components.

You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. click Training Files. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping. In the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted.Mech 330). leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. select the 2 WSHPs. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Therefore. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. As you assign equipment to systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Creating a Piping System | 115 . Assigning a system component to an existing system. This display indicates that the system is selected. where it is easier to review the information. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 5 In the System Browser. right-click the Systems column heading. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. while pressing Ctrl.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. indicating that it’s the active view. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing.

Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 12 In the drawing area. for System Name. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 10 On the Options Bar.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 17 On the Options Bar. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Notice that on the Options Bar. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. select the boiler. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. You have created the hydronic return system. and the Edit System tool is not active. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. for System Name. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

under Design ➤ HVAC . the boiler supplies heated water to the system. In cooling mode. and bypasses the cooling tower. 23 Close the roof plan view. double-click Roof . 26 Click Finish Editing System.Design. and click OK.HVAC Plan . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements.Design ➤ Floor Plans. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 25 Select the boiler. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. In heating mode. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the cooling tower.

28 Using the same method. under Mechanical. and click Properties. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. you can view several parameters. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). enter 0. 32 In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the System Browser. for Water Flow. and click Column Settings.8. and click Expand All. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating the logical connection. and click OK. expand Piping. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click Select. 29 Right-click CHWS. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click OK. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. You also manually modify the layout path as required.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Return system category.

drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Mech 330).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . select Mechanical Equipment. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 5 In the Filter dialog. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and click OK. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. A system preview displays in red. then the Select a System dialog displays. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. When you draw a box to select components. press Tab to highlight the system. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.HVAC Plan . the boiler. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. click Check None. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. click Training Files. you can place the cursor over a system component. and click to select it.

14 On the Generate Layout tab. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. It does not reference the architecture. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. 11 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. or architectural components. click Settings. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. For Inset.9 In the Select a System dialog. select CHWR. duct. enter 450. select Perimeter. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 13 Click Cancel. verify that Solutions is selected. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. structural beams. 10 Click OK.

With each Tab. 17 Optionally. 19 In the drawing area. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 18 Place the cursor over the piping. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.16 Click Finish Layout. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Verify the flow In a previous exercise.75 L/s. and press Tab 3 times. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. to display the path with thinner lines. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the flow for each WSHP is 0.

24 Press Esc.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and click OK.75 L/s). The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. under Mechanical.50 L/s. verify that the value for Flow is 1.50 L/s. 23 Under Mechanical. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK.

28 In the Project Browser.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). On the Options Bar. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. double-click Level 1 . 27 On the System Tools panel. click Edit System. the Number of Elements is now 8. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. access its instance properties. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. as shown. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 38 Using the same method. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.94 L/s.44 L/s. 35 Using the drag control. under Mechanical.50 L/s. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. you physically close the CHWR loop. which propagates flow throughout the system.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6.94 L/s. so the total flow of 6.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and click Cancel. note that the value for Flow is 4. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next.

the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and then click OK. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. For Inset.00%. For Slope. enter 450. 41 Click OK. select a WSHP. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. enter 0. 40 In the Select a System dialog.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. select CHWS. select Perimeter 1 of 5. Click Settings. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type.

46 Click Modify. 48 While pressing Ctrl. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 47 In the drawing area. as shown. In a later exercise.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.

To create the piping system. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. select a different layout solution.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 50 Using the same method. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. or offset elevations are incorrect. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. as shown. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 51 Click Finish Layout.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. click Training Files. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design ➤ 3D Views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you work in the training file. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the return pipes are magenta. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. double-click 3D Building.Design is highlighted.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.

as shown. 6 Press Delete. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view.

8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler. Click to specify the reference point. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. ■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection.

and click Draw Pipe. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 13 In the plan view. select the return pipe riser. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.11 In the Select Connector dialog. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 12 In the 3D view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. The connections are automatically created. and click OK. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. and the lower one is secondary. select the boiler. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping.

for Offset. enter 381. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.In a plan view. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. enter 600. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor down. and you select 1 connector. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and press Enter. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.

The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. 18 Press Esc twice. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 19 In the plan view. and click OK. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. As you place piping runs that are close together. select the primary base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.

134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. and click to draw the pipe. and select it. you select the tee fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.

click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

enter 1200. select the primary base mounted pump. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. for Offset. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 If necessary.28 Press Esc. and click to create the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.

these pipe connections were created automatically. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.33 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. and click Draw Pipe. 35 Using the method learned previously. right-click the bottom control on the tee.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

enter 2850. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. type 300. and click to create the pipe.■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and press Enter.

You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you validate the flow through the system. Next.

50 or 50% of the Flow. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. right-click. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.44 L/s). When you create the pumps in parallel. notice that under Mechanical. and click OK. select the cooling tower. view the properties for the secondary pump. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. 40 Click Cancel. for Cooling Water Flow. 44 In the 3D view. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. right-click. 48 In the plan view.44 L/s.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 41 Using the same method. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. the value is 0 L/s. and click Element Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. notice that Flow is 6. The flow is being propagated through the piping. Connect the cooling tower Next. 43 Press Esc. and click Element Properties. 46 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. as shown. which is rounded up to 3. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical.

■ Lower pipe (outlet).■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. and close the dialog.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. select the cooling tower.44 L/s. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . 50 In the 3D View.

indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is heated by the boiler.52 Close the file with or without saving it. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Valves In this exercise. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. When the valve is open. as shown.Design is highlighted. click Training Files.

7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.4 On the Options Bar. Adding Valves | 145 . 8 Press Esc twice. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. The bypass valve is closed by default. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. and select M_Ball Valve .

parallel to the previously placed valve. place another M_Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .

Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s.44 L/s. right-click. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. under Mechanical. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 19 Using the same method. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. Adding Valves | 147 .15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow is 6. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m.44 L/s. and select M_Ball Valve . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. 22 Using the method you just learned. Initially. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). validate that the Flow is 6. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Sizing Pipe In this exercise.44 L/s. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. 20 Select the bypass valve. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. click Training Files. In heating mode. and select M_Ball Valve .

Design is highlighted. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. for Schemes. as shown. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Flow. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.HVAC Plan . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Size. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Sizing Pipe | 149 . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.

for Branch Sizing.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. enter 1. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps.5 m/s. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or manually modify the pipe. 13 Press Esc. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select And. and for Velocity. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Either relocate the system components. Under Constraints. or offset elevations are incorrect. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and enter 220 Pa/m. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and click to select the branch. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Click OK. select Friction.

The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Using the System Inspector. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. Inspecting the System | 151 . and double-click 3D Building. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System In this exercise. pressure. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m.14 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. click Training Files. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.Design ➤ 3D Views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.

An inspection flag reports the section number.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. This information helps you modify the system design. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss. flow. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as shown. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. as required.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files.rvt. the Static Pressure is 41916. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. 10 Click Finish. targeting those systems that need attention.4 Pa. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.HVAC Plan . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.0 L/s.Design. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. and to size pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 9 Using the same method.Note that the Flow is 1. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. you need to validate them. Warnings display.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125.7. and double-click Level 3 . In this exercise. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. and click OK. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. inspect Section 6 again. select 32° C. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.1 Pa. for Fluid Temperature.

and click Expand All. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 4 In the System Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. If you place components without assigning them to a system.Design floor plan. In the System Browser. and select Level 3 . After you have assigned all components to systems. As you learned when placing components. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 7 In the System Browser. click Close. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design.HVAC Plan . and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. right-click the Systems titlebar. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For example. expand the Unassigned folder. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. and confirm unassigned system components. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. thus assigning the components to a system. and click Show to view all of the system components. 12 In the System Browser. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. otherwise.HVAC Plan . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and click View. the pipe is associated with that system. 9 Right-click CHWS. After you assign components to a system. right-click Hydronic Return. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 10 Using the same methods. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and for pipe sizing. TIP If you have multiple views open. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. double-click Level 1 . all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed.

Checking Piping Systems | 155 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m.rvt. distribution systems. In this exercise you review electrical settings. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. For Temperature. For Material. expand Wiring . 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. wiring. select Copper. enter THHN. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.Wire Sizes. speeding up the design phase. select Copper. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. ■ Click New Correction Factor.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. enter 1. click (Open). click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You also add a wiring type. ■ ■ For Material. For Factor. select Wiring Types. As you place components and create circuits. enter 70. select 90.04. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Select Correction Factor.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. enter 250.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. select Single. enter 240. select Steel. select THHN. For L-G Voltage. Under More Than. For Conduit Type. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Phase. Select Neutral Required. For Value. Click Split.0. select 75. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. enter 2000. select 3. enter 50. select 10000 VA. For L-L Voltage. select Voltage Definitions. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. select Hot Conductor Size. For Neutral Size. select Power. enter 220. For Insulation. enter 240. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. select 120. For Neutral Multiplier. enter 120/240. select Demand Factors. For Minimum. For Max Size. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. For Maximum. enter 1. For Wires. select Distribution Systems. Click OK. select 240. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.

You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . For Group Parameter Under. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. and double-click Level 2 . select Spaces. select Electrical . 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Discipline. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lighting Plan.rvt. restrooms.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. Click OK twice. click Add. Under Categories. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Later in the tutorial. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. click (Open). and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. Verify that Instance is selected. under the Electrical . select Electrical. and conference rooms. In this case the key style is the type of space and. 5 In the drawing area. click Training Files. For Type of Parameter. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. select Illuminance. such as offices. enter Required Lighting Level.Lighting.Lighting group in the space element properties. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. and click OK. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. enter 485. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. note the Required Lighting Level parameter.Lighting. enter Open Office. and for Key Name. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Select Schedule Keys. Click OK. enter Space Lighting Requirements. under Electrical . enter Lighting Levels. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Click OK. For Name. under Available Fields. select Spaces. double-click Required Lighting Level. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category.

20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Notice that as you enter the data. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Click OK twice. Select Blank Line. for Sorting/Grouping. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties.Lighting Plan. click Edit.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. which is mapped to project units.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. 22 Using the same method. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. change the sort order back to the default setting. select Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.

the value input applies only to the selected space. Later in this exercise. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. select Instruction-Standard. for Lighting Levels. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. In this exercise. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. click (Open). that Required Lighting Level is blank. 27 Click OK. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. under Identity Data. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 .

click Training Files. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition.00. then the new value will be 400 lx. enter Required Lighting and click OK. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. Select the scheme for 450. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. and click (Add Value) five times. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. enter 200. For Color. enter Required Lighting Levels.rvt. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add.00 lx.00 lx. and in the At Least column. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. ■ Click OK. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. click (Add Value) again. select Spaces. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. 00 lx still selected. enter 900.00 lx. select Required Lighting Level. for Category. and press ENTER. enter 800. and click (Add Value). and press Enter.00. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. For example. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. verify the By Range is selected. click (Duplicate). and press ENTER. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. Under Schemes. Select the scheme for At Least 20. Select the scheme for 500 lx. for Name. for Title.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . select Spaces. select Spaces. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. enter Lighting Delta. For Color Scheme. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Design ➤ Floor Plans. For Name. 13 Click Calculated Value. double-click Number. Click OK. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.Lighting CF. For Discipline. select Required Lighting. for Available Fields. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Type. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . and Required Lighting Level. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. Name. Average Estimated Illumination. select Illuminance. 8 In the drawing area. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. select Electrical. Level. and double-click Level 2 .

under Condition. Click Background Color. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type a hyphen. On the Formatting tab. select Not Between. for Fields. select Required Lighting Level. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click OK. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Conditional Format. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. For Value. Click OK three times. for Test. select Level. Click OK twice. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. for Custom Colors. select Lighting Delta. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog.■ For Formula. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Red. for Sort by. Select Blank Line. and click Browse. click Browse. Select Header. press the spacebar. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. for Formula. select Average Estimated Illumination.

16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. First. power circuits. Create a panel schedule. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create power loads. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. 171 . Then. Use the System Browser to check your design.

rvt. In the Color dialog. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. click (Open). 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Average Estimated Illumination. click Training Files. select the color legend. By using orange as the color for this range. Under Scheme Definition. 2 In the drawing area. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for the Spaces Category. select Orange. Click OK. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. for Basic Colors. You can create additional color schemes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Lighting Ceiling plan.Lighting CF view is open.

The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . zoom to space Library 219. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. 13 Click the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). which is the lowest value in the specified range. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.

17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.the +/. 18 Click to place the fixture. 20 Select the lighting fixture. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.5 fc range. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 19 Press ESC to end the command.5 fc range is satisfied. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . In the Space Lighting Analysis view. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the fixtures will move accordingly.277V.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. scroll to view space space Library 219. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.00 VA. for Apparent Load. In the Name dialog. enter 162. ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Name enter and click OK.

■ Click OK twice. Placing Switches. enter .85. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. ■ Under Photometrics. and click OK. select Xenon and click OK. click the value for Initial Intensity. select the top center fixture. 2 In the drawing area. Under Electrical. click (Open). junction boxes. enter . Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Under Photometrics. select T5 [HO]. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and Receptacles | 183 . Click OK. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select 463T5_S. Under Photometrics. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ Click Apply. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project.rvt. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. for Type Mark. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Junction Boxes. 9 In space Library 219. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Junction Boxes. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Luminous Flux. for Lamp. for Color Preset.ies and click Open. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.00 lm. Under Photometrics. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Placing Switches. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. click the value for Initial Color. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. you add switches. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. In the next exercise. click Training Files. enter F15. and receptacles to your design. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. click the value for Light Loss Factor. In the Select File dialog. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.93. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. specify 15000.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

Select M_Junction Boxes . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and Receptacles | 185 .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. The element type M_Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Placing Switches.NoLoad.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.

enter 2750. 21 In the drawing area. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Library 219. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Under Electrical. 15 Select the junction box. In the Type Properties dialog.Offset. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. NOTE When entering values. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter JB-1NL.14 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK twice. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note the Number of Poles is 1. for Mark. for Level 2 . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. Click Edit Type. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Placing Switches. right-click and click Column Settings. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Expand General. 23 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 26 In the System Browser. Click OK. Space Number. 24 For any column. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. NOTE If necessary. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Select Size. Select Load. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Space Name. and Receptacles | 187 . Expand Electrical. and Voltage. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Junction Boxes. Distribution System.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

and enter 3650 and press ENTER. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar. select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. Junction Boxes.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Placing Switches.

42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 43 Press ESC to end the command.

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. Placing Switches.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.Surface: 100A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. zoom to the space Electrical 220. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.equipment.208V MCB . Adding wiring to a project is optional. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). and work toward the higher voltage.rvt. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Max. select 480/277 Wye. enter 20. 7 Press ESC to end the command. enter PP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. for Max. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.Loads. enter 20. 8 Select the panelboard.Loads. For Panel Name. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. For Panel Name.480V MCB . Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. for Distribution System. enter LP-2B. 9 On the Options Bar. select 120/208 Wye.

21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Click OK. 23 In the Filter dialog. which is the logical connection between the elements. 20 In the drawing area. and for Category.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. zoom to space Instruction 221. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. for Hot Conductors. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.39 Using the same method. enter 2. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Check None. 42 In the Filter dialog. except without wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. Click OK. and for Category. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Click OK.rvt. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. select Wires. Next you create circuits without showing wire. and create permanent wiring. click Training Files. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Expand Electrical. right-click on the Systems heading. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 13 In the System Browser. Click OK. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and verify that Load. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Distribution System. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. expand Power. and Voltage Drop are selected. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Voltage. and then expand circuit 1. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Rating.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. under Electrical. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 30 Close the System Browser. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Click Tags. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. change the Voltage to 277V. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area.

41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 40 Click OK twice. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. for Type Mark. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select Break. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Click Yes. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click OK.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. under Identity Data. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 47 In the drawing area. click Edit Type. enter FR4. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . click below the first one to place it. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. For Circuit Number. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. notice the label parameters and click Cancel.

49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter a comma. Click OK. 54 Select all of the tags. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click Save. Next you create a switch system. click Check None. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. click (Open). Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 52 In the Save As dialog. Click OK.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.rvt. and for Category. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and click Apply. click Training Files. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left.rfa. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. for File Name. 57 In the Filter dialog.

3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. under Electrical Lighting. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 2 In the drawing area. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter a. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.

16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. enter b. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.Lighting. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. Click OK. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. under Electrical . for switch ID. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.

8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. and data systems. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. under Electrical . and for Category. Click OK. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click Training Files. enter 2. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Circuits are used for power. and click Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Loads. Click OK. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. select the PP-2B panel. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Check None. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Hot Conductors.rvt. 7 In space Electrical 220. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. Creating Power Loads | 207 . lighting. select Electrical Fixtures. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space.26 Close the file with or without saving it.

rfa. and click Open.13 Select the wire again. and in the drawing area. and in the right pane. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Wiring. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. and click to select the circuit. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 19 Click OK.

and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. in space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. as shown. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 26 Press Delete. 28 In the drawing area. select the PP-2B panel. 29 In space Instruction 221. 22 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads | 209 .

There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Next you balance the loads for your design.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.

the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 1-#10. 1-#12. for Rating. click Open. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Under Electrical-Loads. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. 6 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Rebalance Loads. enter 30A. 1-#12. Click OK. 3 In the Electrical space. 1-#10. After re-balancing loads. zoom to space Electrical 220. Had there been a greater imbalance. Scroll down. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. click Training Files. the distribution is shifted. 2 In the drawing area. Finally. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select panel LP-2B.

26 Close the file with or without saving it.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. under Electrical . Next you create a panel schedule. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. and click OK. for Rating. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.Loads. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 15 Select panel PP-2B.Loads. 17 Close the warning dialog. enter 40A. enter 25A. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. for Rating. 24 Click Select Panel. under Electrical . and click Finish Editing Circuit. select the transformer TP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog.

Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. The Panel Schedule Report displays. for Font Size. Click OK. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 .Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. click (Open). Under Body Text. click Edit. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. select Bold and Italic. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Close the report. click Training Files. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. for Font. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. expand Sheets (all). Select PP-2B.rvt. for Font Size. Under Header Text. Under Header Text. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. for Appearance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. under Other. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. enter 4 mm. select Berlin Sans FB. 6 In the Project Browser. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 10 Click OK twice. and open E601 . The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays.Panel Schedules. enter 5 mm. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.

press TAB once. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. click (Open). 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select space Lounge 212. each with a load of 180VA. click Training Files. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. Expand Unassigned.

Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 15 In the dialog. for Panel. 18 Select panel LP-2C. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 17 In the drawing area. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. In the System Browser. under Warnings. Checking Your Design | 215 . 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select MDP-1. 16 Close the details dialog. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 On the Options Bar. zoom to space Electrical 214. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.

216 .

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

you create a PVC pipe type. right-click PVC . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. click Duplicate. planning is critical to a successful design. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Name dialog. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Plumbing Plan . 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Vent. 219 . and click OK. Adding a pipe size. and verify that Level 1 . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click Training Files. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and click Properties. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Sanitary.Design is open. type PVC . In this lesson. In this exercise. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. in addition to loading existing families. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .Sch 40 . click Modify. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 6 Click OK. 27 For the new pipe size. enter 10°. under Mechanical. under Pipe Types. select Tee. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. for Material. and click OK.PVC . and click Main. enter -1250. In the Project Browser. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. click Training Files. select Plastic. 10 On the Selection panel. Tee. enter 54. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. enter 45. 13 In the right panel. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.Vent is listed. 24 For Inside Diameter. enter 46. select None.DWV. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. For Offset.DWV: Standard. Tap. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 25 For Outside. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select Sanitary.PVC . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. PVC . 15 For System Type. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.006 mm.000 mm. Cross. select Branch. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. and open Metric\M_Trap P . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select M_Tee Sanitary . select Sanitary. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. click Pipe Settings. 22 Click New Size.PVC . 17 In the left pane. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . 26 Click OK.293 mm. 21 In the right pane. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Sch 40 . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 18 For System Type.rfa.DWV: Standard. for Nominal.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.Sch 40 .

Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the cold water system. add a hot water heater. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. sanitary piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. and hot and cold water piping. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. 221 . Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. vent.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The base is placed. a toilet. select Sanitary 107. select one of the components in the system. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . as shown. A preview of the piping layout displays. and click OK.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for example. 16 In the Select a System dialog. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.

select Intersections. enter -350 mm. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 29 On the Options Bar. for Slope. and for Offset. You accept this suggested solution. enter -350 mm. select Branch. and click Settings.Sanitary. 23 For Pipe Type. 24 For Offset. 26 For Pipe Type. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. and modify it to meet project requirements. 25 In the left pane.19 On the Options Bar.05%. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Solutions. 28 On the Options Bar. select 100 mm. 30 Click Modify. select PVC . When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 21 On Options Bar. enter -1225. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. for Diameter. select Main. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select PVC . 27 For Offset. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The default settings are automatically modified. enter 1. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Solution Type. and click OK.Sanitary.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.

as shown. 34 Click Modify. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.33 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown.

click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .36 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing .Overall. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed.

you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. as shown. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. adding sinks in the men’s room.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Public. and verify that Level 1 . under M_Lavatory . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design is open.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. 5 On the Placement panel. select 560 mmx560 mm . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. in the Type Selector. click Training Files. 4 On the Element panel.Rectangular. as shown.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.2. 8 Select the sink. select Multiple. enter 711. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Modify. and press Enter to create a second sink. On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line.

select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. click Add To System.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.2. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter to create the third sink. 11 In the System Browser. Press Esc. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. enter 711. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.

use the ViewCube to orient the view.Overall. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .16 On the Edit System panel. as shown. double-click 3D Plumbing . 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.Design ➤ 3D Views. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 21 Select the tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing . In the System Browser. 20 Select the fitting. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 19 In the 3D view. click Finish Editing System.

right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and click to draw the pipe. for Offset. with the tee fitting selected. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.05%. and click Draw Pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 760 mm. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.22 In the plan view. 27 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click Apply. for Slope. press Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1.

move the cursor over the stub pipe. 32 Select the double wye fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard. click to place the fitting.PVC . 30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .DWV.Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays.

37 Select the fitting. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. In the next steps. zoom in to the double wye fitting. on the Options Bar. and press Enter. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 150 mm. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and press Enter. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected. enter 305 mm. 36 In the section view. 34 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the right connector.

as shown. 42 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. and click to place the pipe. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.

and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar. 46 In the section view. and press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector. 47 Move the cursor down. 48 Click Modify.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 49 Using the same method. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. enter 150 mm. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it.

select the P-Trap on the left. 51 In the Type Selector.DWV. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 56 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 53 Using the same method.PVC . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .Sch 40 . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 52 In the plan view. under M_Trap P . select Standard. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 55 In the 3D view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.

right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. connect the right sink to the double wye. enter 150 mm. Move the cursor to the left. select the left P-Trap. Click Modify. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink..57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 58 Using the same method. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click in the plan view. In the plan view.

Press Esc. and select a proposed solution. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. On the Routing Solutions panel. under Pipe Types. select the section of pipe you just drew. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl.■ In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. as shown. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . click Finish to select the recommended solution. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

and verify the slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. click Finish.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.05% is selected. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. verify that 1. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. adjusting the sanitary stack. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. for Slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar.

2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Modify.PVC . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Overall.Floor level line.Design. 10 In the 3D view. 5 Select the tee. and click to draw the pipe.Design.DWV.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Sch 40 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 9 In the Type Selector. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and click Draw Pipe. as shown. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. 3 In the Section view. right-click the top connector. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Plumbing Plan . select the vertical stack. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select the elbow fitting on the right. 7 On the Selection panel.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 .

266 .

with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You create a new pipe type. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. In this tutorial. click Training Files. you can choose to save your work. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type.rvt. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. If the tutorial training files are not present. and click Duplicate. 2 Right-click Standard. go to http://www. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.autodesk. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 267 . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise. In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

for Material. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. select Main. and then click OK. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. under Mechanical. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. For Offset. In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet. 6 In the Project Browser. However. select Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. click Rename. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. you create project parameters and work with schedules. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. For System Type. verify that 2800 is specified. you modify the type properties of the pipe. verify that 2800 is selected. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. structural beams. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. In this exercise. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. and click Properties. 9 Click OK. For Offset. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For Pipe Type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. In the next exercise. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. duct. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. select Carbon Steel. Next. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.

and click Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Categories. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Sprinkler Zone. 6 In the drawing area. select space Instruction 221 as shown. the space crossing lines display. click Add. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. 8 Using a crossing window. select Spaces.Fire Protection Piping Plan . select the upper half of the building. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. and then click OK. When you highlight a space using the cursor. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. under Fire Protection. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click OK twice. enter Zone 1.Design is highlighted. right-click.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Group parameter under. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. enter Sprinkler Zone. select Fire Protection. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.

including a calculated value parameter. and then click OK. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. under Fire Protection. verify that only Spaces are selected. enter Zone 2. and then access instance properties. and click OK. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. to which you add various parameters. 13 Using the same method. for Sprinkler Zone. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise.

select Fire Protection. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and on the ribbon. select Length. 7 Click OK. click Add Parameter. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Click OK. For Group parameter under. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . For Units. The schedule displays. for Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click Field Format.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Obstructed-Combustible. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. double-click on each column separator. 14 Select the new header. enter Light. For Name.Design is highlighted. click the Formatting tab. select Millimeters. 9 On the Formatting tab. Select Schedule keys. 11 Click OK twice. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . For Key name.Fire Protection Piping Plan . create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. enter Maximum Spacing. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter Protection Area Construction Type. Click OK. 6 Using the same method. select mm. For Unit symbol. For Type of Parameter. select Maximum Spacing. select Spaces. select 0 decimal places. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. For Rounding. 10 In the Format dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

select Spaces. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter 4575. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. 16 Using the same method. Click OK. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and press Enter. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the Maximum Coverage Area column.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Unobstructed Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. enter 40. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary.

click . The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Discipline. and click OK. 19 Click the Formatting tab. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Number. and click Field Format. For Formula. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Type. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 20 On the Formatting tab. under Available fields. Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Units. 22 Click OK twice. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Fixed. In the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Common. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Area. select Minimum Sprinklers.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. For Rounding. Click OK. select 0 decimal place.

select Sprinkler Zone. select Grand totals. select Hidden field. For Fields.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. verify that Use default settings is selected. under Other. select Number. select Level. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and select Totals only. and then click Field Format. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Minimum Sprinklers. Select Header and Blank line. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. For Fields. for Sorting/Grouping. select Sprinkler Zone. Under Field formatting. and click View Properties. and then select Hidden field. for Sort by. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level. For Then by. click Edit. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . ■ In the Format dialog. For Then by (second instance). At the bottom of the dialog. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header and Blank line.

and click View Properties. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 30 Click OK twice. right-click the schedule. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog.27 In the drawing area. select Embedded Schedule. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . for Filter by. for Filter. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. select Sprinklers. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. under Other. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. select Count. System Name. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Embedded Schedule. and Count. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and select Totals only. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. For Category. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. double-click Type. select Calculate totals. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. click Edit. click Edit. Under Field formatting. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. delete the word Maximum. for Available fields. On the Formatting tab. select Level equals Level 2. select Grand totals. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields.

44 In the schedule. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. under Identity Data. 43 Click Cancel. double-click FP .Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 41 In the plan view. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. for Protection Area Construction Type. 52 Click OK. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Protection Area Construction Type. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. but their values are not determined. select Ordinary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. Unobstructed. 46 With the space still selected. Unobstructed. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 48 In the floor plan. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select Light. and access the instance properties. and click OK. Unobstructed.Fire Protection Plan Design. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result. and the spacing parameter values are evident. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 50 Access the instance properties.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. click Training Files. you will understand the process. methodology. As you create the system. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.autodesk.rvt. By following the recommended workflow. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you can choose to save your work. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. 279 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 2 . The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. However. At the end of this tutorial.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. go to http://www. If the tutorial training files are not present. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you place the sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.

4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When this happens. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. When there is a small misalignment. After placing the initial sprinkler. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 3 In the Project Browser. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings.

because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. Also. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. select the sprinklers that you placed. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and click to place 3 sprinklers. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 10 Press Esc twice. 9 In space Instruction 202. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Constrain is cleared. 206. as shown. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 13 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and 207.

Next. 18 Type WT. as shown. 200B. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . open Design ➤ FP . and then press Esc.Design. and 200C).Fire Protection Piping Plan .15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. specify a vertical offset. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 17 In the Project Browser.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. For Number. 29 Press Esc. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Next. After creating the logical connection. Notice that the schedule updates. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. for Offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. enter 2900 mm. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and click Element Properties. enter 11.FP_Ceiling view. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. move the cursor to the right. you adjust the offset.19 In the floor plan. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. enter 4100. 25 Click OK. and press Enter. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . and with piping (physical connection). This number is determined in the schedule. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. In the next exercise. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).0. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. under Constraints. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.

click Training Files. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. Unlike logical connections (systems).pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. However. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click View ➤ Systems. 5 Right-click the header. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and select Piping. 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.Design is highlighted. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.Fire Protection Plan . 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.rvt.

8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. press Tab. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Next. place the cursor over a sprinkler. select an initial piping layout. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . and click Select. indicating the logical connection. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. within the Piping Systems folder. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. named Fire Protection Wet. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Creating a Piping System | 285 . Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. In the System Browser. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and select the system. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.

286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for System Name. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Diameter. 13 In the System Browser. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. verify that 2800. 12 On the Options Bar. click Place Base. In the left pane. and on the Options Bar. enter FP Wet_Zone2. select 150 mm. For Offset. enter -3650. click Settings. For Pipe Type. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected.The Edit Piping System panel displays. as shown. system equipment.Wet is selected. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. When the layout is finished.0 is specified. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 22 On the Options Bar. verify that Main is selected. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and a piping layout preview displays. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and number of elements in the system. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. providing system editing tools. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. The Generate Layout tools are activated. select Branch. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 15 In the drawing area. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 19 Click OK. 23 For Offset. click Solutions.

verify that Network is selected. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. In general. A (parallel movement control) displays. Creating a Piping System | 287 . and select solution 4. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. On the Generate Layout panel. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. click Modify. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. and green represents branch lines). First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 29 Click Finish Layout. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. or that offset elevations are incorrect. as shown. select a different layout solution. 32 If necessary. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. Either relocate the system components. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or manually modify the pipe.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.

You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. click Training Files.33 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and then you create piping to physically connect them.rvt. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and select the elbow fitting as shown. and various manual pipe creation tools. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. the Connect Into tool.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 3 If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 8 In the corridor. you can select the pipe or duct. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and pipe or duct is created. 9 On the Edit System panel. click Add To System. or a system component to display system tools. radiators. mechanical equipment. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 5 In the drawing area. air terminals. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Finish Editing System. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and so on) are logically connected by a system. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers.

20 Open Design ➤ FP . and then tile the views. verify that Solutions is selected. for Solution Type. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and select solution 5. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. verify that Network is selected. 23 View the result in the 3D view. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 14 Close the System Browser.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 12 On the Options Bar. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Finish Layout. 21 In the Piping Plan. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.

Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . right-click. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Using the same method.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. select 2800. 25 Select the sprinkler. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.24 In the Piping Plan. 28 In the drawing area. for Offset. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Scale. indicating that it’s the active view. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 31 In the plan view. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. select 1 : 50. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Fire Protection Piping Plan .

8 Right-click. and click View Properties. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .6 Press Esc. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.

13 Select the elbow fitting. select FP . Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown.Design. enter 2135. select Design. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . For View Classification. 19 Make Level 2 . 12 If necessary. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. For Default View Template. 17 Move the cursor up.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. and click Apply Default View Template. 22 In the drawing area.Design the active view. Under Identity Data.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and press Enter.Fire Protection Plan . 14 Select the tee fitting. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Sub-Discipline. enter FP Section_Stair. select MEP Section. and then click Modify. 10 In the Project Browser. drag the top section boundary line up. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Draw Pipe. for View Name. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. and then right-click the top connector. right-click Design ➤ FP . Click OK. 15 Press Spacebar.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.

verify that Automatically Connect is active.23 In the section view. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). and click Draw Pipe. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. and then click Modify. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 26 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. select .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 Select the cabinet. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

verify that M_Gate Valve .rfa. 31 In the alert dialog. 32 In the Open dialog. as shown. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. and then click Modify. 33 In the Type Selector. and click Open. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . click Yes to load a family. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50 mm is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet.29 Close the section view.

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Training Files. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers.

6 In the Filter dialog. height. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). width. or height. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 8 Click Modify. or width. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. 4 In the floor plan view. for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. Changing the diameter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. select 25mm. click Check None. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 7 On the Options Bar. width. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately.

14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. 12 If necessary. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. . click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. By hiding the linked file. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 In the 3D view. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc. click to place the tag. select the linked architectural file.rfa. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. and click Open. Clear Leader. NOTE Tags are view specific. 17 On the View Control Bar. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. and after each segment highlights.

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. and when the section highlights. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . select 100mm. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. press Tab. for Diameter. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 26 Using the same method. 24 In the drawing area. 25 On the Options Bar. select 40mm. The pipe diameter is modified. 23 Close the 3D view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. and maximize the floor plan. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and then tag the piping as shown. as shown. for Diameter.

allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. In this exercise. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. you created a wet fire protection system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . In this tutorial. You added tags to pipes. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. For additional practice.

304 .

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

Design ➤ Floor Plans. 307 . and click OK. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. right-click Copy of Level 1. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. and apply a view template. matchlines. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and view references. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. 2 In the Project Browser. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. If the view included detail graphics. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click Training Files. dependent views. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. you begin the construction documentation for the building project.

Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. more focused. and then press Esc. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. click Training Files. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 In the drawing area. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller.rvt. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Using the same method. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and click OK. as shown. 9 Click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. create dependent views for areas B and C. 7 Close the file without saving.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . to delineate splits in a large floor plan. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. views and put them on the sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.

19 In the drawing area. click the current value. For Line Weight.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select 11. select Double Dash . Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select black. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Click OK. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. In the Color dialog. For Line Pattern. and click OK. 13 Press Esc twice. and then press Esc.

21 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. for Target view. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference.20 Select the upper view reference and. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . on the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 25 Using the same method.

drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 4 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. right-click 3D Plumbing. 2 Zoom in. and zoom to each of the view references. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.rvt. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Plumbing Isometric . indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 27 Using the same method. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.Domestic Water. for View Name. select Plumbing Isometric.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. and select the section box. For Default View Template. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click Properties. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.

select Plumbing. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select Documentation. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. select 3. 6 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. Click Apply. for View Classification. The section crop lines no longer display. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Dash. and click to select it. 10 Right-click. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Sub-Discipline.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Click OK. and then click OK. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click Apply Default View Template. For Pattern. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.

13 Using the same method. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. and click to select it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. press Tab 3 times.

as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. and click to select it.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 15 Right-click. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

click on the Format value. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.Isometric. select 1. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 .16 Press Esc. and for Default View Template. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. specify Plumbing .Sanitary Waste. 19 Using methods learned previously. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and in the Type Selector. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. On the View Control Bar.5mm Arial. For Slope. and in the view properties. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. verify that Common is selected. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

and click to place the spot slope annotation. 26 Press Esc twice. select To the nearest 10. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.rvt. 22 Click OK twice. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. When the view is associated with a sheet. you use a plan view to create a callout view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ In the Format dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. click Training Files. for Rounding. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). select 1 : 50. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. for Scale. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Creating Callout Views | 317 .2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan).

HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. drag it to the sheet. double-click M601 . using the same method. for Line Weight. Click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. select 5. Expand the Callout Boundary category and.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. under Sheets (all). and select the viewport. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. enter WSHP PART PLAN. right-click the callout view. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Click OK. For Title on Sheet. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. for View Name.

22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

and click OK.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). under Names. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template. and click Rename. Creating Callout Views | 321 . right-click the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

322 .

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. as shown. and annotation to create a legend. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. Creating Annotations In this exercise. 323 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. symbols. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. duct tags. linetypes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. click Training Files. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. work with model-based components.

and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 Press Esc twice. and select 1. 8 With the text still selected.

The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. and then click Right Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. 16 In the drawing area. a segment of round duct. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 325 . Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. as shown.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. a return diffuser. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. verify that Leader is cleared.

navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. click Load. for Ducts. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. and click OK. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. as shown. If necessary. 25 In the drawing area.17 Click Modify. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. under Category. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 20 In the Tags dialog. and click Open.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.rfa. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.

and Attached End. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and then press Esc. Leader.26 On the Options Bar. select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Creating Annotations | 327 . 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.

34 In the drawing area. 36 Press Esc twice. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. for Leader. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. select Free End. as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar.

38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. you use temporary dimensions to locate.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and lock lighting fixtures. not simply an instance property. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. That’s because you changed a type property. and click OK. lay out. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and all elements of that type are affected. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. for Leader Arrowhead. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Creating Dimensions | 329 . 37 In the drawing area. select the last tag placed. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 40 Using the method learned previously. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.

11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. and then select the interior face of the wall. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 13 Press Esc. 12 Click EQ. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. select the dimension line. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. On the Options Bar. 14 Using the same method.

and offset them from the wall. 19 Select the dimension value (3376.rvt. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. linework. annotation symbols. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 17 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 331 .Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. 20 Using the same methods. enter 2430. click Training Files. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Because the dimensions are locked. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and press Enter. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.9). and notes. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.

Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .200 Neck. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. For Scale. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Using the same method. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. enter Diffuser Legend. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. For View. select 1 : 50.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 5 Click in the drawing area. select Floor Plan. click below the title to place the diffuser. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Click OK. and select 1. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser .

Creating a Legend | 333 .11 Press Esc. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and select 1. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.

334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 21 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then press Esc.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. The selected detail lines are now thin. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 24 Select the component’s break line. 26 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP and its text note. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.

and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Creating a Legend | 335 .Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.30 Select Spot Elevation . mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then click Modify. enter E. 34 Using the method learned previously. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.

40 Press Esc.39 With the viewport still selected. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Title w Line . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Training Files. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and text.Detailing 15 In this lesson. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. 337 . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. detail groups.113 East elevation view. A drafting view using detail components. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.rvt. A detail callout that references another view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.

Next. and then modify and align the views. place Power Riser .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 Using the same method. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 5 In the drawing area. clear Leader. select each of the 2 panelboards. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .113 East on the sheet. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. and click to place it. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 7 Drag the Power Riser .

for Title on Sheet. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. giving the appearance of a single view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 13 Right-click. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. right-click. and click OK. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the 113 North view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. under Identity Data. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.9 Press Esc.

340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. 21 Using the drag control. In the next exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. select the 113 East elevation view. 19 Select the Level 1 line.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and click Activate View. and select Title w Line . move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. you add wiring to the diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. as shown. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 22 Press Esc.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 2 Close the Project Browser. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. notice that there are no snaps active. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. and then click OK. click New. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select 6. In the New Subcategory dialog. Under Modify Subcategories. expand Lines. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. indicating that it’s the active view.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . verify that Chain is selected.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.rvt. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Beginning at the transformer. In the Line Styles dialog. and click OK.113 North view. 8 On the Options Bar. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you draw. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. enter Electrical Power. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. as shown. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. for Line Weight. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram.

13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.10 Press Esc. as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). enter 3mm. 11 Using the same method.

Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. so that the result is as shown. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 28 Click above the cap. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and select 1. 29 Click Modify.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.

0. You enter exact values for each line length. change the length of the bottom line to 3. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 40 Press Esc.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and press Enter. enter 12. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. Press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 42 On the Options Bar. click on the length dimension value. enter 3. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 39 Move the cursor to the right. enter 7. Using the same method. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. you can ensure that they stay together. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. and press Enter. and then press Esc.

and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . expand Groups ➤ Detail. and then press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. for Name. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 46 In the Project Browser. TP-2B. 54 Select the group. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 47 In the drawing area. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. enter Ground.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 50 With the group selected. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 52 Select the detail group. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. select all 3 lines. and click OK. 51 Using the method learned previously.

you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and will place it on sheet E01.

Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). and then click the corner where the Top. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. click Home. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. select 3D Views. and click Rename. and Left sides converge. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 Zoom in to view the section. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 3 Select the section box. click Training Files. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and click OK. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 8 On the ViewCube. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and double click Typical Make Up Air. and then press Esc. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Name. 5 Right-click the copy. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Back. and click Apply View Template. Walkthroughs. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m.

14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 15 Using the same method. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown.■ ■ Under Names. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and click to specify the second leader point. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Typical. select 3D HVAC Iso. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Move the cursor down and to the left. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point.

352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click on the crop region. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 24 Access the instance properties for the view.18 Press Esc. and then click OK. as shown. and under Extents. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. under Extents. 19 Complete the text labels. as shown. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. To rotate and reposition a text label. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select Crop Region Visible. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.

rvt. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m.25 Click OK. click Training Files. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . scroll down. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 29 Right click the view. and click Deactivate View. Place a detail component. select Crop View and Section Box. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Use detail lines to create a detail group. and click Activate View. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 30 On the View Control Bar. and under Extents. 33 Right-click the view. clear Crop Region Visible. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 In the Instance Properties. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click View Properties.

click the point at the top of the drain. for Sub-Discipline. Click OK. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 12 On the Element panel. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 3 In the Project Browser. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as the rectangle start point. 13 In the drawing area. select Plumbing. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. 9 Zoom in to the component. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select 1 : 5. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For View Classification. Click OK. and click Properties. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select Documentation. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. right-click the view name. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. For Scale. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region.

21 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. and click OK. 20 Select 1. 18 With the filled region still selected. select C. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Concrete. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.P. for Type. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click Modify.I. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140.

click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. select the filled region. and then click to select them. select Multiple. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. (Line). 31 On the Options Bar. 28 Click Modify. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Press Esc. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.

Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 40 Click Finish Region. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then select the side of the slab above the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then press Esc.

48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. select the Flashing Membrane group. and click OK.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. (Rectangle). 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 45 Using the method learned previously. 49 Click Modify.D. for Name. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. draw wide detail lines as shown. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.. as shown. enter Flashing Membrane_F. press Tab to highlight the chain. and then click to select them. 52 In the Create Group dialog.

54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 61 Using the same method. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. press Spacebar twice. as shown. 55 Press Esc. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.

69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Leader and Free End. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 67 On the Options Bar.62 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 64 Press Esc twice.

and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 81 Select the text note. select 15000 (Division 15 . Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and then click OK.70 In the Keynotes dialog. 80 Press Esc twice. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 72 If necessary. and click to specify the text insertion point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. 76 To select the leader start point. 71 Click Modify.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area. select the view title. and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 90 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it. open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful